Fiat - 500 - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012 (2)

2012 FIAT 500 2012 OWNER’S MANUAL Chrysler Group LLC 12FF500-126-AF Sixth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. FIAT is a registered trademark of FIAT Group Marketing & Corporate Communication SpA, used under license by Chrysler Group LLC. Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 10 INTRODUCTION 1 CONTENTS ! Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ! Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6 ! How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ! Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ! Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techniThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to contains the information you desire. read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that The detailed Index at the back of this Owner’s Manual FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers: • the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for contains a complete listing of all subjects. maintaining its validity Consult the following table for a description of the • the range of additional services available to FIAT symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: Group Automobiles customers INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS ! A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function . . . . . . . 16 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 18 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ! Sentry Key# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 20 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ! Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ! Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 16 ! Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 16 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ! Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 ! Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 36 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 36 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 43 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 46 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 ! Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 67 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 ! Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert#) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 40 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical key simply press the mechanical key release button. Mechanical Key Release Button The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ignition Key Removal 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an automatic transmission). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC/ON/RUN position. 3. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position. 4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder. Ignition Switch Positions 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn the key to the left. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance information. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK, sounds a problem with the electronics. signal to remove the key. SENTRY KEY$ The Sentry Key# Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. CAUTION! • Always remove the Sentry Key# from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • The Sentry Key# Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have the vehicle. been programmed to the vehicle electronics. NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Replacement Keys General Information The Sentry Key# system complies with FCC rules part 15 NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once subject to the following conditions: a Sentry Key# has been programmed to a vehicle, it • This device may not cause harmful interference. cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key# Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects. To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. Opening Power Top Remote Function The remote keyless power top function can only be used with the engine off. Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key Release Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or when it reaches the spoiler position. NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with the remote, please refer to the %Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure% in %Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle% for additional information. WARNING! Key Fob NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position. Opening Power Top Remote Function: 1. OPEN − Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you: • Before operating the power top, make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal. (Continued) 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top. • When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation. • Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment. • Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. If a door is ajar the turn signal lights will flash at an increased rate and there will be no horn chirp, this is to indicate that a door is still ajar. Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key# “Customer Key Programming.” If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with distance, check for these two conditions: RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the 1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life following conditions: of a battery is five years. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station 2. This device must accept any interference that may be tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile received including interference that may cause undesired or CB radios. operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. 1. Press the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on the side of the Key Fob. Mechanical Key Release Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob using a small screwdriver. 2 Battery Case Removed Key Fob Screw Location 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the battery observing its polarity. 4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the screw to lock it into place. 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. (Continued) Door Lock Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is incorporated into the door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle, the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key. Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service. POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches There are single window controls located on the shifter bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the driver and passenger door windows. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. Driver Power Door Lock Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 WARNING! Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 2 Power Window Switches Auto-Down — If Equipped The driver’s door window switch may have an AutoDown feature. Press the window switch for approximately one second, release, and the window will go 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down move- LIFTGATE ment, operate the switch in either the up or down To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock direction and release the switch. switches located on the front door handles. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Liftgate Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants opening the liftgate in cold weather. • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren).” Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat. WARNING! Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact their arm. the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in &If You Need Consumer Assistance.& You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. WARNING! 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. (Continued) 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. (Continued) 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. 2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” WARNING! • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. (Continued) Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. Positioning Lap Belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE additional information, refer to “Installing Child ReLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of shoulder belt. feature for each seating position. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the Driver Passenger anchor point. First Row N/A ALR 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, Second Row ALR ALR grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a • N/A — Not Applicable fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the If the passenger seating position is equipped with an latch plate. ALR and is being used for normal usage: 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably folded webbing. wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull which are used to secure a child restraint system. For THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. latch plate into the buckle until you hear a %click.% 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If the entire belt is extracted. Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre- 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- now in the Automatic Locking Mode. able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinaHow To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking position that has a belt with this feature. Children Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) 12 years old and under should always be properly locking mode. restrained in the rear seat. 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert$) BeltAlert# is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert#) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert# will provide both audio and visual notification. The front passenger seat BeltAlert# is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert# may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are The BeltAlert# warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert# can be enabled or disabled by your authorized Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. dealer. FIAT Group Automobiles does not recommend Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire deactivating BeltAlert#. duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder NOTE: Although BeltAlert# has been deactivated, the Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is BeltAlert#) seat belt remains unfastened. 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if the best way to keep the baby safe. equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt extender should be used only if the existing belt is not across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the tender and store it. abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental NOTE: These air bags are certified to the Federal Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument regulations for Advanced Air Bags. panel below the steering column. The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the air bags to have different inflation levels based on the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 3 — Supplemental Driver Side vanced Front Air Bags Knee Air Bag 2 — Knee Bolster This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light are located above the side windows. The trim covering • Steering Wheel and Column the SABIC is labeled SRS AIRBAG. • Instrument Panel This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SAB are marked with • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front • Knee Impact Bolster seats. • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag NOTE: • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag but they will open during air bag deployment. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains authorized dealer immediately. (SABIC) Air Bag System Components • Front and Side Impact Sensors Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, system components: and Seat Track Position Sensors • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB are marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers, placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant, that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Label THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant protection. WARNING! Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Label Location NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the side curtain air bag is located should remain free from any obstructions. • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the SAB; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. (Continued) 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) and Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides required for this vehicle. enhanced protection and works together with the Driver The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Knee Impact Bolster Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemenpassenger side front passenger by positioning the pas- tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag senger for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted Air Bags. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. required, depending on the severity and type of impact. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec- Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the have deployed. risk of injury in rear or side collisions. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciThe Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, away from an inflating air bag. including some that may produce substantial vehicle The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other ON/RUN or START position. If the key is in the OFF/ hand, depending on the type and location of impact, LOCK position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with is not on and the air bags will not inflate. little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units comes on again after initial startup. The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adtics also record the nature of the malfunction. vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air designed to activate only in certain side collisions. bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of Unit collision. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain air bag is about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 event, the ORC will determine whether to have the After the event occurs, when the system is active, the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- message %Fuel Cutoff See Handbook% is displayed. ing functions: Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine com• Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. until the ignition key is turned off. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as System Reset Procedure the battery has power or until the ignition key is After an impact causing air bag deployment, the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel removed. cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned • Unlock the doors automatically. off. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure. Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Customer Action 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Customer Will See Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec- If A Deployment Occurs onds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate procedure must be performed again in order to be immediately after deployment. successful. NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you. floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. WARNING! They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, immediately. seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well. bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the Body Control Module (BCM) fuse block inside the vehicle for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, were buckled/fastened; such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle or the EDR. • How fast the vehicle was traveling. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. WARNING! Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant. 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Children Too Large For Booster Seats • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend Standards. FIAT Group Automobiles also recommends over the front of the seat when their back is against the that you make sure that you can install the child seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it. • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for as possible. weight and height limits. • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the slouching can move the belt out of position. restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the not work when you need it. child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a For additional information, refer to NOTE: child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canatheir back. dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webHere are some tips on getting the most out of your child site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm restraint: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” for typical installation instructions. 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! You should never install LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats share a common anchorage. If installing seats in adjacent seating positions, or if your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH – Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 The lower anchorages are round bars which are part of the seat and body structure. They are located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the surfaces. The lower strap hooks are passed over the top of each bar, pushing aside the seat cover material. In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position, located in the rear surface of the seatback. The lower strap hooks are passed over the top of each bar, pushing aside the seat cover material. Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap. You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hook or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint, preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove the slack in the strap. • When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. In addition, never leave unattended children in the vehicle. WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occu- portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system pant Restraints.” will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate. • In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the Driver Passenger buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path CRS Lock CRS Lock opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate First Row N/A ALR from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt Second Row ALR ALR several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out. Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR: 1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough • If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next, around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure, then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt try a different seating position. retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To attach a child restraint tether strap: • Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor. Remove slack in the tether strap accord• Route the tether strap under the head restraint to ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Tether Straps Routed To Tether Anchors • If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VePets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses hicle”. or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. should be considered a normal part of the break-in and While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY TIPS WARNING! (Continued) Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING! (Continued) • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a system. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is or retractor condition, replace the belt. damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first WARNING! turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of on while driving, have the system checked by an authovehicle control and increase the risk of serious perrized dealer. sonal injury. Defroster • Always make sure that floor mats are properly Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place attached to the floor mat fasteners. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to • Never place or install floor mats or other floor feel the air directed against the windshield. See your coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly authorized dealer for service if your defroster is secured to prevent them from moving and interinoperable. fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ! Power Convertible Top — If Equipped . . . . . . . 76 ▫ Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ▫ Lowering The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ▫ Raising The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 ▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Proceure . . . . . 78 ! BLUE&ME™ Hands-Free Communication — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Wind Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 ▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 ▫ The Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 ! Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 81 ▫ Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 . 84 . 84 . 85 . 91 . 92 3 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 101 ▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 ▫ Ez Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 ▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . 102 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 104 ! To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ! Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 105 ! Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . 105 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ! Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 108 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ! Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ▫ Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 ! Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ! Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 ▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ! Cigar Lighter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Rear Park Assist Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ! Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ! Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . 115 ▫ Glove Box Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . 115 ▫ Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped . . . . . 125 ! Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ! Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ! Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 3 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the • The power top buttons will operate when the ignition power convertible top switch is located on the overhead switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position. console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger • The power top can be remotely operated with the key side button, which is used to open the power top, and the fob. Refer to %Opening Power Top Remote Function% in driver side button, which is used to close the power top. %Things To Know Before Starting% for more information. Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top. Manual Open For manual open, push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position. Power Convertible Top Switch NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/ close mode. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Raising The Power Top Auto close From the convertible top fully open position, push the top close button for approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top. Manual Close For manual close, push and hold the close button until desired position until one-quarter open position. Push and hold again for full close position. NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present. Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for information. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior. • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior. 3 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision. Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure If your power convertible top does not operate in the Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/ closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary. 1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed. 2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using manual mode). 3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position. 4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an additional three seconds. 5. Release the OPEN button. 6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully closed position. 7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED button. At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success- Wind Stop The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle. ful. The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operaAuto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up. operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top Function will be functional. NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity. If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the procedure a second time. 3 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). Adjusting Rearview Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. 3 NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mirror, press the mirror select switch to either the L (left) Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust. door trim panel. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Power Mirror Switches The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Spotter Mirror — If Equipped Folding Mirrors Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle. mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Spotter Mirror Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION — IF EQUIPPED Overview Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a personal telematic system enabling you to use communication and entertainment applications expressly designed for use in the car. Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown) The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and media player, and it is preset for future installation of additional services. The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunction display messages, gives you the possibility of interacting with your Bluetooth# wireless technology mobile phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent” type. The Hands-Free Kit The basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice recognition with Bluetooth# wireless technology. With this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving With this system you can also play your favorite music condition without ever having to take your eyes off the stored on USB device and select tracks and playback road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as modes with both voice commands or buttons on the required by current laws. steering wheel. Bluetooth# wireless technology enables wireless connecThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules tion between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit subject to the following two conditions: installed on your car. • This device may not cause harmful interference. To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth# wireless • This device must accept all interference received, technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit including interference that may cause undesired gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your operation. mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device does not feature this capability. You can also interact with 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE your mobile phone manually and visually using the For further details on the mobile phones supported by steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi- BLUE&ME™, refer to section BLUE&ME™ SUPPORTED function display. MOBILE PHONES. To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with voice recognition, you have to simply pair your Bluetooth# wireless technology enabled mobile phone with the system. Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once. 1 — Mute/ESC 4 — Voice Recognition (VR) 2 — Phone/Main 3 — Phone Hang Up NOTE: • During the mobile phone pairing procedure, BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped with Bluetooth# wireless technology within range and then establishes the connection using a Personal Identification Number (PIN). • Once your phone is paired, you have the option to transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to (LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK ) and the media answer a call and also to answer another incoming player. To activate settings when travelling you can only use voice commands. phone call. • To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the The hands-free kit enables the following operations: buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. • Contact Calling By Voice — you can call a contact in With voice recognition, you can perform system funcyour mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning “keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword, through the entries on the multifunction display. (To it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone recognition is an easy and convenient way to use contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook). BLUE&ME™. • Digit Dialing By Voice — you can dial a phone All the system functions are available within the number by pressing the VR button on the steering BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving, wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed. you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands. • To Call The SMS Text Sender — call directly the last SMS text sender or the sender of a message received When you are travelling, you can interact with and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox. BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands relevant only to phone functions 3 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • To Answer A Call — you can answer an incoming call After you place your mobile phone in the car environby pressing the MAIN/Phone button on the steering ment and create a pairing relationship with BLUE&ME™, you can make phone calls by speaking wheel. keywords or pressing buttons on the steering wheel. • Conference Call — you can call another contact while When using the hands-free phone, the audio output of a you are engaged in a phone conversation (with phone conversation is heard through your car sound Bluetooth# phones supporting this option). speakers. • Call Waiting — while engaged in a phone conversaMessage Reader tion, you can receive notification of another incoming The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts switch between two ongoing phone conversations. you receive on your Bluetooth# wireless technology (Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compatmobile phone that are received when the phone is paired ible mobile phones). and connected to BLUE&ME™ system. It does not pro• Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call — you can vide access to messages that were received before you refuse an incoming call or end a current call by entered the car and connected with the BLUE&ME™ pressing the Phone Hang-up button on the steering system. The message reader will also interpret any abwheel. breviation and emoticon contained in the SMS text. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text • To read the messages received and stored. Messages message reader function or automatic phonebook transcan be read multiple times. fer via Bluetooth#. Consult www.fiatusa.com for further • To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the information on the list of compatible mobile phones. steering wheel or voice commands. Message reader functions are managed by the control • To delete individual messages or the entire inbox buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™ using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice voice commands. commands. The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read operations: abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I • To display on the instrument panel multifunction love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-) display a visual notification signal indicating that you will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write have received a new SMS text on your Bluetooth# SMS texts. wireless technology mobile phone, with sender’s Media Player number/name; BLUE&ME™ will also ask whether to With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play, via the read you the message that has been received. car sound system, the digital audio files stored on a USB • To manage the list of SMS texts received on your device by simply connecting it to the USB port located in BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone. the glove box of the car. 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In this way, while you are driving you can play your NOTE: • The media player does not support audio files comfavorite personal music collections. pressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Right • iPod# Player — see dedicated paragraph under Media Management) protected audio files. Non-supported Player Functions. audio files that may be present on the USB device will The media player enables the following operations: be ignored. • Digital Audio Playback — you can play all your • To use the media player, you have to simply connect digital audio files (.mp3,.wma,.wav,.aac) or play a (directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to customized playlist (.m3u or. wpl format). the car USB port. Turning the ignition key to ON, BLUE&ME™ will start building your media library. At • Audio File Selection By Category — you can play all the end of this operation you can surf the whole audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or library and scroll its categories as required using the genre. buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. • Playback Options — while playing tracks you can BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection via the car select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track, sound system. Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences; for this reason certain functions shall be disabled by the BLUE&ME™ system until driving conditions are secure and, if required, only when the car is stopped. • Read and Follow Instructions: before using your system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this “User’s Guide”. Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences. • Keep the User’s Guide in the car: when kept in the car, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully. (Continued) SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Adjusting Bar While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, the floor. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Recline Adjustment The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline lever, lean back until the desired position has been reached, and release the lever. 3 Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Seat Height Adjustment The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. EZ Entry Feature The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback, dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat. Height Adjuster EZ Entry Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to the seat back memory being set only – The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posiits locked position once the rear passengers are seated. tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to Memory Feature reestablish memory function option 1), the seat has to be The driver seat also has a memory feature, which can returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track operate in two ways: position as described in Memory function option 1). Memory Function Option 1) — Full Seat Back And Heated Seats — If Equipped Track Fore/Aft Position Memory: On some models, the front driver and passenger seats After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are position they were most recently adjusted to. This is located on the center instrument panel area. accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is Press the switch once to turn on the heated returned upright. seats. Press the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off. Memory Function Option 2) — Seat Back Only Memory: NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first within two to five minutes. be returned upright prior to going back to the last fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted before operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of an accident. Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend Head Restraints forward minimizing the gap between the back of the Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint. by restricting head movement in the event of a rear UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push position, see your authorized dealer immediately. button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by downward on the head restraint. qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer. WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Rear Head Restraints To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push their normal position following a rear impact. If the button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push Push Button 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your To open the hood, two latches must be released. Vehicle” for information on tether routing. 1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located on the left kick panel, rearward. Rear Head Restraint Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop hood, near the center, and raise the hood. rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! Safety Latch Location Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation. Headlight Operation NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 High Beams With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams. Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beams until the lever is released. The DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Parking Lights To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and turn on the headlights. NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on with DRL. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Turn Signals Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to indicate the operation of the turn signal. NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned to a straight position. Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. Turn Signal Operation Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds. CAUTION! Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery. Interior Lights The interior light switches are located in the overhead console. The interior lights can be set to three different Interior Light Timing (Center Position) positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right There are four different modes of operation that can be Position). activated in this position: Using the switch on the left overhead, press the switch to • When one door is opened a 3 minute timer is activated. the right from its center position and the lights are always on. Press the switch to the left from its center position and • When the key is removed from the ignition (within the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a position, and the lights are turned on and off when the 10 second timer is activated. doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side • When the doors are unlocked with Key Fob a 10 secof the overhead console controls the map or reading ond timer is activated. function of the lights. Press the switch to the right to turn on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights on the left light. will turn off. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) • When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated. NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON/RUN position. Front Fog Lights — If Equipped The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, just below the radio. Fog Light Switch Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column. NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 3 Front Windshield Wiper Operation There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access these modes: Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off This is the normal position of the wiper lever. Intermittent Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers will operate intermittently. 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent Front Windshield Washer Operation but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease. steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is Low Speed released. Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed. CAUTION! High Speed Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. Manual High Speed/Mist Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off. • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 CAUTION! (Continued) • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield Rear Wiper Operation wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operin the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal controls. Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over Speed Control Buttons accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec(40 km/h). tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at right side of the steering wheel. the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button vehicle set speed. and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will To Activate operate at the selected speed. Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise speed and on level ground before pressing the SET Indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned button. off when not in use. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, WARNING! or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed You could lose control and have an accident. Always memory. leave the system OFF when you are not using it. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established. To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of increase until the button is released, then the new set the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). speed will be established. To Accelerate For Passing Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indicavehicle set speed. tion of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and moderate hills is normal. recommendations. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance Control. from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. Rear Park Assist Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated. The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist 12 in (30 cm) away. system indicates the nearest obstacle. The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System. SIGNAL Obstacle Distance Failure MEANING INDICATION Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker) • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that inAn obstacle is present within the creases as the distance decreases. sensors’ field of view • Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm) • Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Menu Functions” for further information). Visual Signal (instrument panel) • Icon appears on display. Sensor or System failures • Message is displayed on multifunction display (where provided). While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condimuted. tion occurs for the external sensors, the signal is cut off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers The audible signal is cut out immediately if the distance parallel to walls). increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Failure Indications A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument panel warning icon. Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in The warning icon is illuminated and a message (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the is displayed on the multifunction display (if sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument Park Assist System Usage Precautions Panel” for further information. NOTE: The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indior other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON. system operating properly. Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist. shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must disabled. The system is turned off automatically. 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster. CAUTION! • Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. (Continued) 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING! • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 To Open Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Press the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. for approximately one second after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position. NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the To Close windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power open or partially open positions. This is a normal occursunroof button and hold it for approximately one second, rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows switch a second time and hold for approximately one together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs second to completely close the sunroof. with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to Pinch Protect Override minimize the buffeting or open any window. If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents the sunroof from closing, press the switch forward and hold 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the desired location. Sun Shade — If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or closed. To open the sun shade press the tab and move the shade to a full open position. Manual Sun Shade UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, located in the floor console, for added convenience. This power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low power devices. Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position. CAUTION! Power Outlet • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the CUPHOLDERS For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- floor between the front driver and passenger seats. cated on the floor console between the front seats. Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 STORAGE Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped Some models may be equipped with storage under the Glove Box Compartment front passenger seat. Pull outward on the latch to open The glove box is located on the right side of the instruthe storage compartment. ment panel. Pull outward on the door latch to open the glove box. Push the glove box door upward to close it. Passenger Seat Storage Glove Box Compartment 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity. Push down the release button, located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched. Rear Seat Release Buttons UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. CAUTION! Folded Rear Seats REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. (Continued) 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ! Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ! Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ! Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ! Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 144 ▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ▫ EVIC Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . 149 ! Sales Code (RAB) Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 ▫ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 ▫ Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 4 130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Functions And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ▫ Sirius# Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . 178 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ▫ CD MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ▫ Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ! iPod#/USB/Media Player Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ! Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 ! CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ! Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 189 ! Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 190 ▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 — Side Vent — Multifunction Lever – Light Control — Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer — Central Air Vents — Storage Compartment/Radio 7 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Glove Compartment 9 — Rear Defrost Button 10 — Hazard Button 11 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Windows Control 13 14 15 16 — — — — Storage Compartment Shift Lever Sport Button Horn/Driver Airbag 132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133 2. Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear 1. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped window defroster. This indicator will illuminate The Glow Plug light will flash during engine oil when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window viscosity sensor measurement in cold weather. defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes. During this measurement (up to 10 seconds), the starter will be disabled. If the measured oil viscosity is OK, the CAUTION! light will turn off and the engine will be allowed to crank. If the measured oil viscosity is too high, engine cranking Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to will be disabled and the light will blink repeatedly until the heating elements: the oil temperature is raised, preferably by an externally- • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on powered electric engine block heater (available from the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth your authorized dealer). and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to The message %Plug In Engine Heater%, will be displayed the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature after soaking with warm water. is below 5°F (-15°C) at the time the engine is shut off as • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abraa reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the start. window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 4 134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped long the function remains active. For further information, This indicator will illuminate when the front fog refer to “Follow Me Home” in “Understanding The lights are on. Features of Your Vehicle”. 7. Turn Signal Indicators 4. Low Fuel Light The arrows will flash in unison with the exteWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0 galrior turn signal, when using the turn signal lon (3.8L) this light will turn on, and remain on lever. until fuel is added. 5. High Beam Indicator 8. Generic Warning Light This light indicates that the headlights are on high The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerany of the following conditions occur: Oil ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam. Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home Intervention, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor (Headlight Delay) Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park Failure. lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow Me Home feature is activated this indicator will illuminate and the EVIC will show how UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135 9. Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 12. Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential 10. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If This indicator shows that the Speed Control the charging system light remains on, it means that the system is on. vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. 11. Seat Belt Reminder Light If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. RUN, this light will turn on if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt 4 136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 13. Power Steering System Warning This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. 14. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137 Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 4 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. 16. Automatic Gearbox Failure This light will illuminate when there is an automatic transmission fault. 17. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. 18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 19. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. 4 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and WARNING! stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for vehicle checked immediately. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force 20. Brake Warning Light Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the This light monitors various brake functions, Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS including brake fluid level and parking brake Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. application. If the Brake Warning Light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position a problem with the brake system reservoir. to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light sary. inspected by an authorized dealer. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on conapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has tion. been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is problem diagnosed and corrected. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. NOTE: 21. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) • The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/ Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily This light indicates the Electronic Stability Coneach time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC driver. system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. 22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation / 23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light Malfunction Indicator Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition Light in the instrument cluster will come on for switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and four seconds when the ignition switch is may stay on for as long as four seconds. turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC 4 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. 25. Temperature Gauge The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. 24. Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors or the trunk may be ajar. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaIf the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have CAUTION! the light inspected by an authorized dealer. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap” paragraph. as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument 26. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and Information Center (EVIC) Display Area “Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic been driven. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).” U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the (EVIC)” for further information. correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same 4 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 27. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the right side of the vehicle. When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. NOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately update accurately when refueling with the engine on. 28. Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. 29. Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h). Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Outside Temperature Display • Trip Computer Functions 4 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Displays EVIC Display Automatic Transmission EVIC Display Manual Transmission 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Temperature Indicator Fuel Level Gauge Clock Odometer Sport Mode 6 — Message Display 7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge 8 — Digital Speedometer 9 — Ice Warning Indicator 10 — Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Ice Warning Indicator Temperature Indicator Fuel Level Gauge Clock Odometer 6 — Message Display 7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge 8 — Digital Speedometer 9 — Autostick# Gear Indicator 10 — Auto/Sport/ECO Indicator UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 EVIC Control Buttons Press the MENU ESC button briefly to access the menu and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu option. Press and hold the MENU ESC button (approximately one second) to return to the main screen. NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a few seconds. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Press the + button to scroll upward through the dis- Setup Menu played menu and the related options or to increase the The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a cycle. Press the + and – buttons to access the different displayed value. options and settings (setup). Press the – button to scroll downward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MENU ESC button. Single presses on buttons + or – will scroll the value displayed. through the setup menu options. The menu includes the NOTE: Buttons + and – activate different functions following functions: according to the following situations: • Speed Beep • To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards. • Trip B Data • To increase or decrease values during settings. • Set Time 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Set Date Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu • Speed Display 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to select the main menu option to set. • See Radio • Autoclose • Units • Language • Buzzer Volume • Button Volume • Daylights (D.R.L.) • Hill Start • Exit Menu 2. Press the + or – button (by single presses) to select the new setting. 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected. Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to display the first submenu option. 2. Press the + or – button (by single presses) to scroll through all the submenu options. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to select the indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. setup menu. 4. Press the + or – button (by single presses) to select the Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN new setting for this submenu option. position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and 5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to store the new release the MENU/ESC button. To reset the oil change setting and go back to the previously selected submenu indicator system (after performing the scheduled mainoption. tenance), refer to the following procedure. 6. Press and hold the MENU ESC button to return to the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.(Do not main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold). start the engine.) Change Engine Oil Indicator System 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly, three times within 10 seconds. Change Engine Oil Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip Computer • When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 99.59 features a driver-interactive display (displays informa(99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset autotion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption, matically. average speed and travel time). • Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the Trip Button system. The TRIP button, located on the right steering column NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infordescribed values. mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be • A short button press displays the different values. reset. • A long button press resets the system and then starts a Start Of Trip Procedure With the ignition on, press and hold the TRIP button for new trip. over one second to reset. New Trip To reset: Exit Trip To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have • Press and hold the TRIP button to reset the system been displayed or hold the MENU ESC button for longer manually. than one second. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the • Average consumption B menu screen or press and hold the MENU ESC (approxi• Average speed B mately one second) to go back to the main screen without • Travel time B (driving time). storing settings. Trip Functions NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cantrip). not be reset. “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: Values Displayed • Trip distance A Range This indicates the distance which may be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving conditions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the display in the following cases: • Average consumption • Instant consumption A • Average speed A • Travel time A (driving time). “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Trip distance B • Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). • The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running. 4 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving Travel Time style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Trip planning must take into account the above notes. Features) Distance Travelled Dimmer This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable Average Consumption of detecting environmental light conditions and adjustThis value shows the approximate average consumption ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly. since the last reset. NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may Instant Consumption change while travelling following an event that causes This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con- switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on display if the car is parked with the engine running. avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.). Average Speed To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows: This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func1. Press the + or – button to set the required brightness tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. level. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 and 125 mph or km/h, depending on the selected unit. The setting will increase/decrease by five units each time the +/– button is pressed. Press and hold the +/– button to increase/ decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly Speed Beep (Speed Limit) pressing the button when you approach the required With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit setting. (mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is • Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the immediately alerted. menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The display will show the message (Speed Beep). To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: 2. Press the + or – button to select speed limit activation 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” will flash (On) or deactivation (Off). on the display. 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly press the 2. Press the – button. “Off” will flash on the display. MENU ESC button to display the presently set activation speed. Pressing the + or – buttons selects the speed limit. Press MENU ESC to confirm selection. 2. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU ESC (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings. 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the Set Time (Clock) menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button This function may be used to set the clock through two (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen sub-menu items: “Time” and “Mode.” without storing the settings. Proceed as follows: Trip B Data (Trip B On) 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The display will Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or show the two sub-menu items “Time” and “Mode.” deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display. 2. Press the + or – button to navigate the two sub-menu For further information see “Trip Computer.” items. For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows: 3. Select the required option and then press the MENU ESC button. 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” or “Off” will flash on the display (according to previous setting). 4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly press the MENU ESC button and “hours” will flash on 2. Press the + or – button to select the setting. the display. 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the 5. Press the + or – button for setting. menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button 6. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “minutes” (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen will flash on the display. without storing the settings. 7. Press the + or – button for setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 NOTE: • The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the + or – button is pressed. Press and hold the button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required setting. Set Date This function may be used to set the date (day - month year). To change the date proceed as follows: 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “year” will flash on the display. • Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the “Time” sub-function. 2. Press the + or – button for setting. • When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly press 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “month” will the MENU ESC button. The previously set display flash on the display. format will flash on the display. 4. Press the + or – button for setting. • Press the + or – button to select “24h” or “12h.” 5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “day” will When you have selected the required settings, briefly flash on the display. press the MENU ESC button to go back to the Time, 6. Press the + or – button for setting. Mode sub-menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button (approximately one second) to go back to the NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit main screen without storing the settings. each time the + or – button is pressed. Press and hold the 4 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL + or – button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you info displaying proceed as follows: approach the required setting. 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button “On” or “Off” • Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the will flash on the display (according to the previous menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button setting). (approximately one second) to go back to the main 2. Press the + or – button for setting. screen without storing the settings. 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the See Radio (Repeat Audio Information) menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen mation relevant to the sound system. without storing the settings. • Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate activation or AutoSTore. “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. • CD audio, CD MP3: track number. Speed Display When this function is activated the cluster will display the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display feature, proceed as follows: To change the setting proceed as follows: 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button “On” or “Off” 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “MPH”, “km/ will flash on the display (according to the previous h”, then “Off” will flash on the display (according to setting). previous setting). 2. Press the + or – button for setting. 2. Press the + or – button to select display deactivation 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h”. menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button without storing the settings. (approximately one second) to go back to the main Units (Set Units) screen. This function may be used to set the measurement unit in Autoclose three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel With this function active, the doors will automatically Economy.” lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph To set the required unit, proceed as follows: (24 km/h). 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to display the three sub-menus. 4 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Press the + or – button to navigate the three sub- If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will menus. be displayed in either km/l or l/100km. 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press 1. Press the + or – button for setting. the MENU ESC button. 2. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the 4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu: briefly press sub-menu. the MENU ESC button. Either “mi” or “km” will appear 3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly on the display (according to the previous setting). press the MENU ESC button. Either “°F” or “°C” will 5. Press the + or – button for setting. appear on the display (according to the previous setting). 6. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the 4. Press the + or – button for setting. sub-menu. 5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the 7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly sub-menu. press the MENU ESC button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or When you have made the required settings, briefly press “l/100km” will appear on the display (according to the the MENU ESC button to go back to the sub-menu previous setting). screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button (apIf the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will proximately one second) to go back to the main screen be displayed in “mpg.” without storing the settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 To adjust the volume proceed as follows: Language (Selecting The Language) The messages can be displayed in the following lan1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The previously guages: Italian, English, German, Portuguese, Spanish, set volume “level” will flash on the display. French, Dutch, Polish. 2. Press the + or – button for setting. To set the required language, proceed as follows: 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The previously menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button set “language” will flash on the display. (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. 2. Press the + or – button for setting. 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment) This function may be used to adjust the volume of the beep accompanying the buttons. MENU ESC , + or – can be adjusted according to 8 levels. Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning Buzzer Volume) With this function the volume of the buzzer accompanying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to one of eight volume levels. To adjust the volume, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The previously set volume “level” will flash on the display. 2. Press the + or – button for setting. 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the 3. Press the + or – button for setting. menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button 4. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen menu screen, or press and hold the button (approxiwithout storing the settings. mately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R. Indication) Hill Start Assist This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop Automobiles Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R. on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of system. brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) time after the foot has been removed from the brake This function may be used to activate / deactivate the pedal. Daytime Running Lamps. Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” or “Off” 1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to display the will flash on the display (according to previous setting). three sub-menus. 2. Press the + or – button for setting. 2. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” or “Off” will flash on the display (according to previous setting). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO menu screen, or press and hold the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. Exit Menu This function closes the initial menu screen. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the main screen. Press the – button to return to the first menu option (Speed Beep). Press the + button to return to the last menu option (Daylights). Introduction The radio has been designed according to the specifications of the passenger compartment, with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard. 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. The instructions for use are given below and we recommend you to read them carefully. Suggestions WARNING! Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to no be able to hear important traffic sounds, i.e. sirens, horns, etc. This could cause an accident. Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises. Road Safety Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g. Care And Maintenance store stations) before beginning to drive. Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning Reception Conditions and polishing products could damage the surface. Reception conditions change constantly while driving. CDs Reception may be interfered with by the presence of The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is away from the broadcaster. playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these guidelines: • Only use branded CDs. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 • Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger • The use of original CD media is required for the best marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the quality audio production. Correct operation is not outside and clean them from the middle outwards. guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity • Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or above 650 Mb. sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface • Do not use commercially available protective sheets of the CDs. for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get • After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc. to prevent them from being damaged. • If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few • Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperaseconds before the system starts to play it. The CD tures or moisture for long periods. player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected • Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being recorded surface with pencils or pens. copied is often shown in very small letters or is difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may • Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed, be, for example, “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY PROdistorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in TECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A malfunctions or damage to the player. PC/MAC”. 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The CD player is capable of reading most compression With Bose# Premium Audio system (if equipped): systems currently in use, following the development • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers. of these systems, the reading of all compression for• Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars. mats is not guaranteed. Technical Specifications The complete system consists of: • Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each of the rear side panels. • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one • speaker in each of the front doors. • • Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in • each of the front pillars. • • Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker in each of the rear side panels. • Antenna on the car roof. • Radio with CD/MP3 player. A subwoofer under the right front seat. An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel. Antenna on the car roof. Radio with CD/MP3 player. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON TUNER A-B-C MEDIA BUTTON (Mute/Pause Button) AUDIO GENERAL FUNCTIONS On Off AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source selection Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped and present) source selection MODE Short button press Long button press Short repeated button press GENERAL FUNCTIONS Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/ Pause) Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/right balance (BALANCE), front/rear balance (FADER) MODE Short button press Short repeated button press Short repeated button press Menu activation: short button press Adjustment type selection: press or Adjustment of values: press or 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BUTTON (Information Button) MENU +Vol/–Vol BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist, Folder information (if available) in CD, Media Player and Satellite (if so equipped); Toggles RBDS information in FM Advanced functions adjustment Menu activation: short button press Adjustment type selection: press or Adjustment of values: press or Volume adjustment Press + button: volume increase Press – button: volume decrease RADIO FUNCTIONS Radio Station Search: • Automatic Search • Manual Search MODE Automatic search: press buttons or (long press for fast forward) Manual search: press buttons or (long press for fast forward) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 BUTTON 12345 RADIO FUNCTIONS Current radio station storing Stored station recall BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS CD ejection Previous/next track play CD track fast forward/rewind Previous/next folder play (for CD-MP3) General Information The radio offers the following functions: Radio Section • PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW frequency bands • RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) • Automatic/manual station tuning MODE Long button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively Short button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively MODE Short button press Short button press Long button press Short button press • FM Multipath detector or or or • Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40 stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5 on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5 on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC) 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable automatic volume adjustment depending on the car speed • Automatic Stereo/Mono selection CD Section • Track selection (forward/backward) • Fast forward/rewind through tracks WARNING! On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety as well as causing damage to the final stages and the speakers. CD/MP3 Section • CD Display function: display of track number and on mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since • MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG) start of the track • Folder selection (previous/next) • Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW • Track selection (forward/backward) • Fast forward/rewind through tracks • MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the track, name of the file • Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it had been set higher when previously used. Audio Section • Mute/pause function • Soft mute function • Loudness function Turning The Car Radio Off Press and hold (approximately 2 seconds) the (ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off. • Separate bass/treble tone adjustment Selecting The Radio Functions By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly, the following audio sources can be selected cyclically: • Front/rear fader • AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped) • Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped) • Right/left channel balancing Functions And Adjustments Turning The Car Radio On The car radio comes on when the is pressed briefly. (ON/OFF) button Selecting The CD Function By briefly pressing the MEDIA button, the CD audio source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded). Volume Adjustment To adjust the volume, press the buttons +Vol or –Vol to increase/decrease the volume. 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mute/Pause Function Press the button briefly to activate the MUTE function. The volume will gradually decrease and the wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display (in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode). display will show the Bass level value for the source activated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will show the wording “FM Bass +2”). Use the buttons or to scroll through the Menu functions. To change the setting of the selected function, button again to deactivate the MUTE use the or buttons. Press the function. The volume will gradually increase until it The current status of the selected function appears on the reaches the previously set level. display. When the volume level is changed using the dedicated The functions managed by the Audio Menu are: controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the vol• BASS (Bass adjustment) ume is adjusted to the new level selected. Audio Adjustment • TREBLE (Treble adjustment) The functions that can be selected from the audio menu • BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment) change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/ • FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment) SATELLITE. Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio • LOUDNESS deactivation) functions. After the AUDIO button is first pressed, the (Loudness function activation/ UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 • EQUALIZER — if equipped (activation and selection Balance Adjustment Proceed as follows: of factory equalization adjustments) • USER EQUALIZER — if equipped (customized equal- 1. Press AUDIO button. ization adjustment) or button to set “Balance” in the 2. Press the Tone Adjustment AUDIO menu. Proceed as follows: button to increase the sound from the 3. Press the button to increase the sound from 1. Press AUDIO button. left speakers or the the right speakers. or button to select “Bass” or 2. Press the “Treble” in the AUDIO menu. or buttons briefly, the levels will By pressing the change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the or button or to increase/decrease 3. Press the levels will change quickly. the bass or treble adjustments. Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs or buttons briefly, the levels will By pressing the at the same level. change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the levels will change quickly. 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Fader Adjustment Proceed as follows: 1. Press AUDIO button. 2. Press the AUDIO menu. or button to set “Fader” in the Loudness Function — If Equipped The Loudness function improves the volume of the sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass and treble. To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loudness” setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the button to increase the sound coming function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few 3. Press the button to increase the seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness from the rear speakers or the sound coming from the front speakers. Off”. or buttons briefly, the levels will Preset/User*/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If By pressing the change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the Equipped The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated. levels will change quickly. When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble” at the same level. settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button or to 3. Use or buttons to select %EQ User.% select one of the adjustments: 4. Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer. • “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can 5. On the display a 7 bar graph will appears, in which be changed by the user) each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be • “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music adjusted by using the or buttons. The selected or sound) bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using buttons. • “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop music sound) 6. To store the setting, press the MENU or AUDIO buttons. • “Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound) Menu When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the MENU Button Functions wording “EQ” lights up. Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu *User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped function. To set a personalized equalizer adjustment: or buttons to scroll through the menu Use the 1. Press AUDIO button. functions. To change the setting of the selected function, or buttons to set EQ function. or buttons. 2. Use the use the 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The current status of the selected function appears on the Speed Volume Function — If Equipped This function automatically adapts the volume level to display. the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the The functions managed by the Menu are: speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level • Speech Volume inside the passenger compartment. To activate/ deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording • Aux Audio Offset “Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the • Radio Off current status of the function: • Sat ID • Off: function deactivated • System Reset • High: function activated (high sensitivity) • SIRIUS# Telephone Number • Speed Volume • On Volume Limit Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function. • Low: function activated (low sensitivity) On Volume Limit This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the maximum volume limit when turning the radio on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 The display shows the function status: NOTE: • Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the • “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on activation/deactivation of the function and not the the volume level will be: minimum or maximum volume value. − If the volume level is equal to or higher than the • If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be maximum value, the radio will come on at the maxiadjusted between the minimum and the maximum mum volume. level. − If the volume level is between the minimum and Radio Off Function maximum values, the radio will come on at the same This function makes it possible to set the radio switching volume as before it was switched off. off mode by choosing between two methods. − If the volume level is equal to or lower than the The chosen mode appears on the display: minimum value, the radio will come on at the mini• “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connecmum volume. tion with the ignition key; the radio is turned auto• “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP same volume as before it was switched off. The position. volume level can be between 0 and 40. Use the buttons or to change the setting. 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off indepen- Radio dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for (Tuner) Introduction a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has When the car radio is turned on, the last function that been turned to the STOP position. was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3, System Reset Function AUX) is activated. This function is used to restore all settings to the factory To select the Radio function when another audio source is values. The options are: being listened to, briefly press the TUNER button. • NO — No restore intervention. Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will • YES — The default parameters will be restored. Dur- show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of ing such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears the selected radio station, the frequency band selected on the display. At the end of the operation, the source (e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1). does not change and the previous situation will be Frequency Band Selection displayed. With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired reception band. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Each time the button is pressed the following bands are By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds, the tuned station will be stored. Pressing the A-B-C selected cyclically: button will change between the preset memory group in • AM, FM or SAT (if equipped) the current frequency band. Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings Automatic Tuning on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station Briefly press the or button to start the automatic selected on the respective frequency band. tuning search for the next station that can be received in Preset Buttons the selected direction. The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the or button is pressed for longer, the rapid If the following pre-selections: search is started. When the button is released, the tuner • 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC will stop on the next station that can be received. • 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB) Manual Tuning This is used to manually search for stations in the • 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC) preselected band. To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly band and then briefly press the corresponding preset or button to start the search and repeatedly the button (from 1 to 5). 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL in the desired direction. If the or button is SIRIUS# Satellite Radio pressed longer, the fast search starts and then stops when With over 130 channels, SIRIUS# Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100% the button is released. commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports, Stereophonic Broadcasters news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game, If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The bigautomatically switched from Stereo to Mono. gest and most compelling names in talk with Howard SIRIUS$ Satellite Radio — If Equipped Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line SIRIUS. A one-year SIRIUS# Satellite Radio subscription of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. is included. SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the are trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsidantenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or iaries. SIRIUS Radio requires a subscription, sold sepaabove the antenna. rately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SIRIUS and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Terms & Conditions available at sirius.com/service terms. SIRIUS Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., and PR. Service available in Canada; see www.siriuscanada.ca. You can find SIRIUS’ current terms and conditions at http://www.sirius.com. Re-Subscribe To SIRIUS# Satellite Radio New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS# Satellite Radio with SIRIUS# Satellite Radio Program Types their radio. Following expiration of the free services, it Program Types can be selected by pressing the or will be necessary to access the information on the Subbuttons. The Program Type will change to the next scription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. category and the radio will then tune to first station in Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu or buttons will tune Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the that program type. Pressing to only the stations in that program type. selected Set-up Menu function. or buttons until %All% is displayed Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your Pressing the will allow normal tuning to all stations. receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0. The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock, Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian, correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, Entercorrectly, then the SIRIUS subscription will not be able to tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health, be transferred to the new radio and will not be active Religion, Traffic/Weather. 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A your service, either call the number listed on the display Sirius Radio When a radio needs to be replaced, the dealer will need or visit the provider online. the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the CAUTION! SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number contains 12 digits. Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any The following are instructions for retrieving the Elecerrors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its tronic Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model use in vehicles. radios: SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are tradeTo retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module marks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is SIRIUS Radio requires a subscription, sold separately placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription Prices and programming are provided by SIRIUS and are will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & will not be active when installed in the customer’s Conditions available at sirius.com/service terms. SIRIUS vehicle. Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., & PR. Visit www.sirius.com UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using Introduction good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed This chapter describes the operation of the CD player possible. only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the CD Loading/Ejecting “Functions and Adjustments” chapter. To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the CD Player Selection motorized loading system, which will position it corTo activate the CD player built into the equipment, rectly. proceed as follows: The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition • Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will track will start to play. remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source or listened to before being switched off, will be activated. CD Player • If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and then briefly press the MEDIA button to select the “CD” function mode. The last track listened to will start to play. When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol “CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain displayed for the whole time required for the radio to read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio automatically starts playing the first track. 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press the button with the radio turned on, to activate the motorized CD ejection system. After ejection, the last audio source listened to before playing the CD will be heard. A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these functions are over. At the end, with the CD mode activated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected. If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automatically be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not resume playing until the %MEDIA% button is pressed to select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last source prior to CD mode. Display Information When the CD player is operating, information will appear on the display with the following meaning: The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off. Possible Error Messages If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc error.” The CD will then be ejected and the audio source activated before the CD mode selection will be heard. • “Track 5” indicates the CD track number. • “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the track (if the relevant Menu function is activated). Track Selection Briefly press the button to play the previous CD track button to play the next track. The tracks are and the selected cyclically: the first track is selected after the last track and vice versa. If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds, button, starts the track again from the pressing the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 beginning. In this case, if you want to play the previous NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. button twice consecutively. track, press the Track Fast Forward/Rewind Keep the button pressed down to fast forward the button pressed down to selected track and keep the fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will stop once the button is released. MP3 Mode In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio files have been recorded in an MP3 format. CD MP3 Player The specifications and operating conditions for playing MP3 files are the following: To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use Pause Function good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible. To pause the CD player, press the button. The The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that wording “CD Pause” appears on the display. create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks button (folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The To resume listening to the track, press the again. folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected. Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 • The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance player. with ISO standard 9660. 4 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the “.wma” files with a different extension will not be CD button pressed for more than 2 seconds. reproduced. NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may • The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are: take a few seconds to start playing. While checking the 44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz, disc the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files are detected, the radio will resume playing the audio mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s). session from the point where it was interrupted. • Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced. Display Information NOTE: The track names must not include the following characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close ID3–Tag Information Display brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure In addition to the information relating to the time that the names of the files do not contain these characters; elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to Title Track, Artist and Author. involved. Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automatically starts playing the audio session. It is possible to When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this information has not been recorded for the track played, the text %UNKNOWN% will be displayed for that field. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Selection Of Next/Previous Folder • If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in Press the button to select a next folder or the sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single button to select the previous folder. The display will level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the show the number of the folder. level of the main folders. The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is Troubleshooting selected after the last folder and vice versa. General If no other folder/track is selected in the next 2 seconds, Sound Volume Low the first track on the new folder will be played. The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F” At that moment selected the last track in the folder is (front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level playing, the next folder will be played. adjustment is equal to R+9. Structure Of The Folders The radio with MP3 player: Source Can Not Be Selected Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to • Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain be listened to. MP3 format files 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CD Player The Cd Does Not Play The CD is dirty. Clean the CD. The CD is scratched. Try using another CD. The Cd Can Not Be Loaded A CD is already loaded. Press the the CD. MP3 File Reading Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) — If Equipped button and remove A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is available as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the Navigation User Guide for further information. Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files The CD is scratched or dirty. The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly Displayed. In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly. iPod$/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod# or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartment. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. 4 1 — iPod# Or External USB Device Holder 2 — Cable Jack 3 — USB Connector Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual for iPod# or external USB device support capability. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control Pressing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ grammed in the radio preset pushbutton. CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to CD Player Operation select/enter an item while scrolling through menu. Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the control is different depending on which mode you are in. beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the each mode. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for too high. further information. NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) precautions: oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service. surface. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from wiping from center to edge. your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchby relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is ing the disc. not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be or anti-static sprays. turned down or off during mobile phone operation. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Temperature Control CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to make you comfortable in all types of weather. the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler Manual Heating And Air Conditioning temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. 2. Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. Manual Temperature Control (MTC) The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials and one inner push knob. 3. Recirculation Control Rotate this control to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 NOTE: • Panel • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select • Bi-Level the outside air position for maximum defogging. Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost and Mix. • Floor • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 4. Mode Control Rotate this control to change the system between Modes • Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost). window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining 5. A/C Button Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is • Defrost engaged. Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with MAX A/C maximum blower and temperature settings for best For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation windshield and side window defrosting. modes at the same time. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary. ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Operating Tips Chart 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped • The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the driver to select individual comfort settings. • The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience. • The system can be controlled manually, if desired. The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) 1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recirculation automatically. Press and release to select. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 2. A/C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning (A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 6. Front Defrost Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when ON. The blower will automatically default to medium-high if the Defrost mode is selected. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 3. Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. 7. Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small 4. Blower Control Up Button amount flowing through the defrost and side window There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed increases demister outlets. as you press this button. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 8. Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument 5. Mix Mode panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side winPerforming this function will cause the ATC to switch dow demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or into manual mode. snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9. Blower Control Down Button • When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed decreases indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If as you press this button. Performing this function will the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. setting is manual and Recirculation is on. Automatic Operation 10. Temperature Control Down Button Provides temperature down control. Push the button for 1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature cooler temperature settings. Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate when on. 11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF. 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature control 12. Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting. The buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that indicator illuminates when ON. comfort level. NOTE: • When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is flash if pressed. This indicates that you can not pro- not necessary to change the settings. You will experience ceed to this mode due to fogging risk. the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 NOTE: • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” in this section of the manual. NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically. There are 12 fixed blower speeds. Use the blower control up or down buttons to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you press or hold the blower control up button and decreases when you press or hold the blower control down button. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic Blower Control mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by pressing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode. will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds Manual Operation are selected. This allows the front occupants to control This system offers a full complement of manual override the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the features. AUTO mode. 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The operator can also select the direction of the airflow mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators by selecting one of the following positions. illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Mix Mode Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off while keeping the windshield clear. wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the Defrost Mode amount of airflow from these outlets. Air comes from the windshield and side window Floor Mode demister outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of temperature settings for best windshield and side winair is directed through the defrost and side window dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the demister outlets. blower will automatically default to medium-high. Bi-Level NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Air Conditioning (A/C) The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A/C system. Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle. NOTE: • If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may to prevent fogging of the windows. lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Defrost mode to improve • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disselect Defrost mode and increase blower speed. abled automatically if this mode is selected. 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort. As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the DEFROST mode. smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging. Summer Operation NOTE: In some cases during high temperature operation, the air conditioning system performance may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition. Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system. When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode. Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months, Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette obstructions. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS ! Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 207 ! Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 211 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 ▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 212 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 212 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 ! Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 209 ! AutoStick# — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 209 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 5 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . 228 ! Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ! Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 229 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 230 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 ! Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 231 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 232 ! Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ! Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 ! Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 226 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 227 ! Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 ! Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 240 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 241 STARTING AND OPERATING 205 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 242 ! Tires — General Information ! Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ! Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 248 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 ▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 262 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 ! Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 ! Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 ! Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 5 206 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ! Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 268 ! Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 268 STARTING AND OPERATING 207 STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear. WARNING! Never leave children in the vehicle alone. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. The child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. The child could operate power windows, other controls or move the vehicle. Manual Transmission – If Equipped Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK. Normal Starting NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the Normal Starting procedure. 5 208 STARTING AND OPERATING Cold Weather Operation If Engine Fails To Start To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low WARNING! temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start engine block heater has not been used. An externallythe vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing powered electric engine block heater is available as serious personal injury. optional equipment or from your authorized dealer. The message %plug in engine heater% will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start. CAUTION! Use of the recommended SAE 5W-30 oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 209 CAUTION! (Continued) • To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up. 5 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED Five-Speed Manual Transmission WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. Shift Lever Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the ring under the knob and, at the same time move the gearshift lever to the right and then backward. 210 STARTING AND OPERATING Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be NOTE: sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when • Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is moving, can result in transmission damage. starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear. • During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light transmission. accelerations, fifth gear is recommended. Recommended Shift Speeds Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear table. on the clutch. Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must Units In mph (km/h) be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When AccelEngine selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (aperation 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 Size proximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal Rate and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 38 (61) 1.4L stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be proCruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52) duced, the pause length should be increased. STARTING AND OPERATING 211 Downshifting AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and CAUTION! prolong engine life. CAUTION! If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch. To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade. When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Move the shift lever into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not move the shift lever between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. 5 212 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/ OFF position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. Six-Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display (located in the instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You Key Ignition Park Interlock must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interthe PARK position (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK/OFF position. lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK. self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new STARTING AND OPERATING 213 vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. hundred miles (kilometers). The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick# shift control (refer to “AutoStick#” in “Starting and Operating” for further information). Moving the shift lever forward or rearward (–/ +) while in the AutoStick# position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. Shift Lever PARK Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be This range supplements the parking brake by locking the done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. 5 214 STARTING AND OPERATING Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 215 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the ignition key in the vehicle. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 5 216 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: • When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. • Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. STARTING AND OPERATING 217 CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick# mode (described below) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to DRIVE achieve maximum efficiency. Normal operation will reThis range should be used for most city and highway sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downsuitable level. shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The Transmission Limp Home Mode DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could tics under all normal operating conditions. result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condiin third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or 5 218 STARTING AND OPERATING PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer following steps: service is required. 1. Stop the vehicle. AUTOSTICK$ — IF EQUIPPED AutoStick# is a driver-interactive feature providing 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. manual shift control, giving you more control of the 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. vehicle. AutoStick# allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. improve overall vehicle performance. This system can 5. Restart the engine. also provide you with more control during passing, city 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, longer detected, the transmission will return to normal trailer towing, and many other situations. operation. STARTING AND OPERATING 219 into a higher gear if the engine speed is too low. An Operation audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is When the shift lever is in the AutoStick# position (to the selected. left of the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the • When coming to a stop, the transmission will downtransmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever shift through the gears based on vehicle speed. When forward (-) triggers a downshift, and moving it rearward the vehicle is at a stop, first gear will be selected. (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the • Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator. snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear NOTE: In AutoStick# mode, the transmission will only after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward (+) once or twice. rearward (+) or forward (-), except as noted below. AutoStick# is deactivated when the shift lever is moved • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick# is engaged because the transmission will not shift autoout of the AutoStick# (+/-) position. matically. General Information • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when • You can launch the vehicle from a stop in first, second, AutoStick# is engaged. or third gear. The system will ignore attempts to shift 5 220 STARTING AND OPERATING • If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine. Acceleration An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipselected. pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull • The transmission will automatically upshift when nec- erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs essary to prevent engine over-speed. when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. • Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually selected ratio, however: WARNING! − If the system detects powertrain overheating, the transmission will revert to a special automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off. − If the system detects a problem, it will disable the AutoStick# mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. STARTING AND OPERATING 223 WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. The power steering system is speed sensitive for light steering effort during slow speed parking maneuvers, and gradually increases the steering effort as vehicle speed increases to provide a tighter/more sporty steering response. 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. The parking brake lever is located in the center console. Parking Brake To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as When the parking brake is applied with the ignition possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. completely. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away STARTING AND OPERATING 225 from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/ RUN) position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE Manual Transmission – If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine response. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal. 3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate. STARTING AND OPERATING 227 Automatic Transmission – If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. 5 SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode. 228 STARTING AND OPERATING BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example; repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that required with the power system operating. If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake use. Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic (Continued) brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control is released, the BAS is deactivated. under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and WARNING! help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to “Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Start- • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the ing and Operating” for further information. natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailBrake Assist System (BAS) ing road conditions. The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking (Continued) capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. STARTING AND OPERATING 231 WARNING! (Continued) • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING HSA Activation Criteria Disabling/Enabling HSA The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be activate: done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to • Vehicle must be stopped. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further 7% grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill. information. • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., Electronic Stability Control (ESC) vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill This system enhances directional control and stability of is in REVERSE gear). the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by WARNING! applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in may occur. This could cause a collision with another the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, responsible for braking the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 233 ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. 5 ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission) ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission) 234 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below. Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. STARTING AND OPERATING 235 To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator operation. Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes mode by pressing the switch. Once the situation requiron continuously with the engine running, a malfunction ing ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as WARNING! possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the will be illuminated. All other stability features of tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. ESC function normally. When in “Partial Off” mode, The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ system is reduced. 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel- TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little Tire Markings throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. NOTE: • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously. The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades STARTING AND OPERATING 237 NOTE: • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa• tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” or “S”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter %P% is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards &....blank....& = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code — %R% means radial construction —%D% means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 239 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: &....blank....& = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load = Light load tire C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running from the sill to the roof. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or KPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure. 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar. Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasgross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. axles must not be exceeded. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of To determine the maximum loading conditions of your cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and (295 kg) (because 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed [295 kg]). the weight referenced here. 5 244 STARTING AND OPERATING 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this (392 kg). manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities STARTING AND OPERATING 245 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 247 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar. The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal CAUTION! wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, altire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent consumption. moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. which could damage the valve stem. 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very 12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire the winter. dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the and cold tire inflation pressures. outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire STARTING AND OPERATING 249 WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Radial-Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial-ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial-ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity. WARNING! • Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). (Continued) 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. • Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the stopping when you are stuck. wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel Emergencies” for further information. on the vehicle at any given time. STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 — Worn Tire to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 — New Tire replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Life Of Tire Replacement Tires The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many factors including, but not limited to: characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure lent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on • Distance driven “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. WARNING! The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend You could lose control and have an accident resulting that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire in serious injury or death. specifications or capability. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. STARTING AND OPERATING 253 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have an accident. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (Continued) CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer. NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire. 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Use Security Chain Company (SCC) SCC Z6 low profile or equivalent chains on 185/55R15 tires only. • Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use. • Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0.5 mile (0.8 km). • Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry pavement. • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer, if different from the speed recommended by the vehicle manufacturer. Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) (Continued) chains. STARTING AND OPERATING 255 The suggested rotation method is shown in the following TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at diagram. different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. 5 Tire Rotation 256 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. 5 258 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire the tire. failure or condition. Base System • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the while adjusting your tire pressure. instrument cluster. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver Module STARTING AND OPERATING 259 • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated, and the “Check Tire Pressure” text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios: 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on wheel and tire assembly. solid. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the tire pressure in the compact spare tire. tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph will still turn ON due to the low tire. (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni- General Information toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the and then remain on solid. following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. STARTING AND OPERATING 261 • This device must accept any interference received, Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to including interference that may cause undesired your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at operation. high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses: Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4 symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the apCanada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4 (Single) propriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle. FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis- Reformulated Gasoline sion regulations and provide satisfactory Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner fuel economy and performance when us- burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spean octane range of 87 to 91. The manufac- cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imturer recommends the use of 91 octane or prove air quality. higher for optimum performance. 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% Ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% Ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher Ethanol content may void the vehicle’s warranty. CAUTION! Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: • operate in a lean mode • OBD II “check engine light” on • poor engine performance • poor cold start and cold driveability • increased risk for fuel system component corrosion STARTING AND OPERATING 263 To recover from a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasoline without MMT. Since the once with E-85 perform the following: MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the • drain the fuel tank pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not their gasoline contains MMT. • change the engine oil It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels • disconnect the battery to reset the engine controller higher than those allowed in the United States. long term adaptive memory MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformuMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged lated gasoline. exposure to E-85 fuel. Materials Added To Fuel MMT In Gasoline All gasoline sold in the United States is required to MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional blended into some gasoline to increase the octane numdetergents or other additives is not needed under normal ber. Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number you should not have to add anything to the fuel. without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT has been shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission • replace the fuel filter and oil filter 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system. • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. (Continued) • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of Methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period of time. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL CAUTION! Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle. Fuel Filler Cap • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a %clicking% sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message NOTE: will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected tank is full. twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving • Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one the problem will turn the MIL off. click. This is an indication that the cap is properly TRAILER TOWING tightened. Trailer towing with this vehicle is not allowed. 5 268 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Dolly Tow On Trailer Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Front Rear ALL Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Transmission in NEUTRAL OK NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis- ground. sion is in NEUTRAL. CAUTION! Do not flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ! Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 ▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 ! If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ! TIREFIT Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 ▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 273 ! Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 ▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 ▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 ! Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped . . . 282 ! Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 ! Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 6 270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ! Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 ▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ! Enhanced Accident Response System . . . . . . . 301 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Do not use this emergency warning system when the an impending overheat condition: vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers to high. This allows the heater core to act as a may wear down your battery. supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 6 272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. TIREFIT KIT Small punctures up to 1/4 in (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/h). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273 TIREFIT Storage The TIREFIT kit is located under the front driver’s seat. 4. Power Button TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 6. Sealant Hose (Clear) 5. Mode Select Knob 7. Air Pump Hose (Black) 8. Power Plug Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. 1. Sealant Bottle 2. Deflation Button 3. Pressure Gauge 6 274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Selecting Sealant Mode TIREFIT Usage Precautions Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sysHose (clear hose) (6) when selecting tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) this mode. “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. • Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT • kit. Using The Deflation Button Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use. After each use, always replace these components immediately at an authorized dealer. When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275 • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit. • You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1⁄4 in (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses. WARNING! • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit. • Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: − If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger. − If the tire has any sidewall damage. − If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. − If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. − If the wheel has any damage. (Continued) 6 276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) − If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. • Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source. • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. • TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277 Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT (B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT: (A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT: 1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode position. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the deflated tire. valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground. 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw This will provide the best positioning of the kit when the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the valve stem. air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition. NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. 4. Set the parking brake. 6 278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the • Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRETIREFIT kit. FIT kit. 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if availparking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. able. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white the TIREFIT kit. fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. use. Call for assistance. NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the tire. the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. Sealant Hose (6): Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the (C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit. 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle”. pressure within 15 minutes: • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. 6 280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. (E) After Driving: Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT” before continuing. (D) Drive Vehicle: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, 1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure position. distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem, screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 stem. Volt outlet. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the Gauge (3). vehicle. If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire serfurther. Call for assistance. vice center. 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.” inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door open- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the auing. thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit. NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: mended inflation pressure before continuing. 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher: 6 282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED recessed area under the sealant bottle. 3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly. 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing. 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place. 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). 7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle. WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283 WARNING! (Continued) • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The jack and jack-handle are stowed in a bag under the front driver’s seat. Jack Stowage 6 284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench Spare Tire Removal The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on cargo area. the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle. 1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area. Winch Access Plug Lowering/Raising Spare Tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285 CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch. 3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle. Spare Tire 6 286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. When the spare is clear, remove the knob or plastic 5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it molded nut by rotating it counter-clockwise. through the center of the wheel. Plastic Molded Nut Retainer WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287 Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 5. Turn Off the ignition. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions 6 WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. (Continued) 288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. (Continued) Jack Warning Label NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the “Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Operating” for information about the spare tire, it s use, and operation. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289 CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver’s seat. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). Front Jacking Location 6 290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. 3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is Jacking Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291 WARNING! WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 4. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. CAUTION! 5. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. WARNING! To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. 6 292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel bolts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel bolts. 9. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle. 6. Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. WARNING! 7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. 8. Finish tightening the bolts. Push down on the wrench 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have while tightening the wheel bolts. Alternate bolts until the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible. each bolt has been tightened twice. The correct wheel bolt torque is 63 ft lbs (85 N·m) for steel wheels and 75 ft lbs (100 N·m) for aluminum wheels. If you doubt that you have tightened the bolts correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293 WARNING! CAUTION! A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE 11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpCorrect the tire pressure as required. started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Spare Tire Stowage pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly Reverse instructions of the spare removal section. so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed. precautions. 6 294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. Preparations For Jump-Start The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment. Positive Battery Post 1 — Positive Battery Post 2 — Negative Battery Post WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295 WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 6 296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the the reverse sequence: negative (-) post of the booster battery. 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the battery. discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable the fuel injection system. from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your 9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmisyou should have the battery and charging system in- sion) and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinspected at your authorized dealer. ning the wheels, is most effective. CAUTION! Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. 6 298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control or Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle. CAUTION! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission or clutch (manual transmission) overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Firmly set the parking brake. 2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located on the right side of the shift lever housing. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299 6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Automatic Transmission • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. Shift Lever Override Access Cover • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position without starting the engine. CAUTION! 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, push and hold the override release lever in. DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. 6 300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Manual Transmission CAUTION! (Continued) • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground). • Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. All Transmissions If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed (wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON/ RUN position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL. Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. CAUTION! Battery power is required to release the brake/ transmission interlock system (automatic transmission only). There is a removable plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to • If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301 override the system. The ignition key must be in the • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as ON/RUN position to use the override lever. the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed. CAUTION! Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Unlock the doors automatically. After the event occurs, when the system is active, the message %Fuel Cutoff See Handbook% is displayed. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine comENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and the communication network remains intact, and the starting the engine. power remains intact, depending on the nature of the System Reset Procedure event the ORC will determine whether to have the After an impact causing airbag deployment, the left and Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel ing functions: cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned off. • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure. until the ignition key is turned off. 6 302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ! Engine Compartment — 1.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 ! Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . . 306 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 ! Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 ! Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ! Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ! Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 7 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 329 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 329 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 ▫ Convertible Top Care – If Equipped . . . . . . . 336 ! Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 ! Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 ! Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ! Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 ▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 345 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . 346 ! Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 ! Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L 7 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 6 7 8 — Battery — Air Cleaner Filter — Engine Oil Fill — Washer Fluid Reservoir 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen: serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should which you can use prior to going to the test station. To not proceed to the I/M station. check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system crank or start the engine. is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. 7 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 WARNING! CAUTION! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. 7 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil CAUTION! Checking Oil Level Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a oil temperature could damage your engine. fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Change Engine Oil Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is give you an incorrect reading. time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informaabout five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut tion. off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. whichever occurs first. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on 7 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- station, or governmental agency for advice on how and ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. information. Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type Materials Added To Engine Oils disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replaceDo not add any supplemental materials, other than leak ment. The quality of replacement filters varies considerdetection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure engineered product and its performance may be im- most efficient service. MOPAR# engine oil filters are high paired by supplemental additives. quality oil filters and are recommended. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, maintenance intervals. indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR# engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. (Continued) 7 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental 7 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR# oil, or refrigerants. Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the Body Lubrication lock cylinder. Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Windshield Wiper Blades tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a MOPAR# Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts and help reduce streaking and smearing. concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use removed. Particular attention should also be given to washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1 — Wiper Arm 2 — Pivot Cap 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the upward unless the pivot cap is raised first. liftgate glass. 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass. 7 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the blade holder. wiper blade until it snaps into place. 5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! 1 2 3 4 — — — — Wiper Blade Blade Pivot Pin Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Holder Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. 7 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System age: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. 7 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Coolant Checks Selection Of Coolant Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or CAUTION! rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) enaccumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the damage and may decrease corrosion protection. face of the condenser. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolCooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill ant is different and should not be mixed with Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) enmaintenance intervals. gine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a system in an emergency, it should be replaced with considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough possible. rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly (Continued) dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze). MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): • The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR# Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below !34° F (!37° C) are anticipated. • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionAdding Coolant ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up engine cooling system. to ten years or 152,000 miles (247 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle. 7 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze). The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL RANGE”. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfacsafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. month. 7 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may expansion bottle must also be protected against freezresult in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) pering. formance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. for leaks. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at maintenance intervals. 50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your WARNING! engine which contains aluminum components. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or hoses are not kinked or obstructed. riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also condenser clean. reduce braking capacity in an emergency. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services, or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is on. brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer for service. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reremoving the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Mainfluid level up to the requirements described on the brake taining Your Vehicle” for further information. fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the WARNING! brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid transmission , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to can severely damage your brake system and/or both the brake system and the clutch release system. The impair its performance. The proper type of brake two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the one system will not affect the other system. The manual original factory installed hydraulic master cylintransmission clutch release system should not require der reservoir. fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the (Continued) 7 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) CAUTION! Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 Manual Transmission – If Equipped NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately. Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission Automatic Transmission – If Equipped fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in The automatic transmission and differential assembly are “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. contained within a single housing. Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole. The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid. Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perforFrequency Of Fluid Change mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmisUnder normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informathe vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubrition. It is important that the transmission fluid be maincant has become contaminated with water. tained at the prescribed level using the recommended Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. 7 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- Fluid Level Check The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer mission; only the approved lubricant may be used. serviced only. Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered Fluid And Filter Changes product and its performance may be impaired by supple- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- maintenance intervals tives to the transmission. The only exception to this Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geothey may adversely affect seals. graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads CAUTION! passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, the chemicals can damage your transmission compowhich exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, nents. Such damage is not covered by the New road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme Vehicle Limited Warranty. hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle. hicle in the shade using MOPAR# Car Wash or a mild What Causes Corrosion? car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of clear water. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. • If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR# Super Kleen Bug The most common causes of corrosion are: and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove. • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR# • Stone and gravel impact. Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains • Insects, tree sap and tar. and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. • Salt in the air near sea coast localities. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. 7 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider a month. mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR# Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer open. has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. Special Care MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care • For tough stains, apply MOPAR# Total Clean or a mild All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove • For grease stains, apply MOPAR# Multi-Purpose heavy soil, use MOPAR# Wheel Cleaner or select a Cleaner or a high quality cleaner, to a clean, damp nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only remove soap residue. MOPAR# cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish. Interior Care Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Use MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric Equipped upholstery and carpeting. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manUse MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl ner: upholstery. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomwith a clean, dry towel. mended for leather upholstery. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. 7 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore, different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR# Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do Instrument Panel Bezels not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may CAUTION! scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do When installing hanging air fresheners in your venot spray cleaner directly on the mirror. hicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Instrument Panel Cover Some air fresheners will damage the finish of The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use contact any surface. protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses low glare surface. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. 7 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. Convertible Top Care – If Equipped NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips. • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior. • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior. Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 Washing Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material. If you must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are preferred. CAUTION! Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top. The top should be washed with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use detergent. CAUTION! Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area. Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering. Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local authorized dealer for further suggestions. 7 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES Cavity Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel. 1 Vehicle Fuse Number F12 F32 2 3 4 5 Fuse Panel 6 F53 F38 F36 F43 Mini Fuse Description 7.5 Amp Right Low Beam Brown 5 Amp Front and Rear Tan Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights 5 Amp Instrument Panel Tan Node 20 Amp Central Door LockYellow ing 10 Amp Diagnostic Socket, Red Car Radio, Climate Control System 20 Amp Bi-Directional Yellow Washer MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 Cavity 7 8 9 Vehicle Fuse Number F48 F13 F50 F51 10 Mini Fuse Description 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan Passenger Power Window Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling Airbag Car Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light, Clutch Cavity 11 12 13 14 Vehicle Fuse Number F37 Mini Fuse Description 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor Ignition, Climate Control Driver Power Window F49 5 Amp Tan F31 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow F47 7 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Underhood Fuses The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover. Front Distribution Unit The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. Cavity Maxi Fuse F01 60 Amp Blue F02 20 Amp Yellow F03 20 Amp Yellow F04 40 Amp Orange F05 70 Amp Tan F06 20 Amp Yellow F06 30 Amp Green F07 40 Amp Orange Mini Fuse Description Body Controller Audio Amplifier Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Pump Electric Power Steering Radiator Fan Single Speed Radiator Fan Low Speed Radiator Fan High Speed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 Cavity Maxi Fuse F08 30 Amp Green F09 F10 F11 F11 F14 F15 F16 Mini Fuse Description Blower Motor 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan Powertrain F17 Horn F18 Powertrain F18 Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) High beam (Shutter) Cigar Lighter F19 Transmission F23 15 Amp Blue 7.5 Amp Brown Cavity Maxi Fuse F17 F20 F21 Mini Fuse 25 Amp White 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 5 Amp Tan 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow Description Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Powertrain Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Air Conditioning Heated Seats – If Equipped Fuel Pump Anti-Lock Brake Valves 7 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Maxi Fuse F24 F30 F82 F84 F85 F87 F90 30 Amp Green Mini Fuse Description 7.5 Amp Stability Control Brown System 15 Amp Fog Lamps Blue Sunroof/ Convertible Top 10 Amp Transmission Red 15 Amp Rear Defroster, Blue Heated Mirrors 5 Amp Tan Lights 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery. • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 REPLACEMENT BULBS NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. Interior Lights Bulb Type Overhead Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C5W If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. Exterior Lights Bulb Type Front Low and High Beam Headlamp. . . . . . . . . HIR2 Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps. . . . . W21/5W Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11 Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WY21W Side Direction Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W Rear Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PY21W Rear Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W Rear Tail and Stop Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P21W/5W Rear Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . W5W License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (See Authorized Dealer) BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps 1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing. 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise. 3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place. 5. Reinstall the plastic cap. 7 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps 3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing. 1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right. 4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise. 2. Open the wheel housing access door. 5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place. 7. Reinstall the plastic cap. Front Fog Lamps To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps 1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand 1. Open the liftgate. access to side marker lamp. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp 2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove assembly. the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. 5. Reinstall the wheel liner 7 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Unsnap backplate and separate from the lamp hous- 2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly. ing. 3. Disconnect the electric connector. 4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing 4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder. them slightly and turning counter-clockwise. 5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and re5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out. place it. 6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. 6. Close the back cap locking it properly. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the 1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening guard caps. screws. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil with Filter 1.4 Liter Engine Cooling System 1.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR# Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) — with Manual Transmission 1.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR# Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) — with Automatic Transmission U.S. 10.5 Gallons Metric 40 Liters 4 Quarts 4 Liters 4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters 5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters 7 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR# Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. MOPAR# Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. DCPR7E-N-10 (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm]) 87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR# C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid MOPAR# AW-1 Transmission Fluid MOPAR# DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent. 7 M A I N T E N A N C ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 353 E MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ! Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 S C H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E 352 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NOTE: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the manual must be done at the times or mileages specified time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainif the oil change indicator message is NOT illumitenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating nated. conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your driving. Inspection and service should also be done vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. S anytime a malfunction is suspected. C H The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals E exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 6 months, whichever D time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. comes first. U Based on engine operation conditions the oil change L Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator E indicator message will illuminate, this means that service S is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a 8 as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Change Engine Oil” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 353 M At Each Stop For Fuel A • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct I N operation. • Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level At Each Oil Change while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the • Change the engine oil filter. accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required. Once A Month • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required. • Check the fluid levels of the engine coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, and add as needed. T E N A N C E CAUTION! S C Failure to perform the required maintenance items H E may result in damage to the vehicle. D U Required Maintenance Intervals L Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following E S pages for the required maintenance intervals. 8 M 354 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or N T 6 Months Maintenance Service E Schedule N Included in the Maintenance Program A N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. C E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of S C H E D U L E S 8 irregular wear, even if it occurs before 8,000 miles (13 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Included in the Maintenance Program ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 16,000 miles (26 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 355 M 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Included in the Maintenance Program ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 24,000 miles (39 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 356 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule N T Included in the Maintenance Program E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 32,000 miles (52 000 km). A ❏ Inspect exhaust system. N ❏ Replace the spark plugs. C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. E ❏ Replace cabin filter. S C H E D U L E S 8 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. Check and adjust hand brake. Inspect brake linings. Inspect CV joints. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 357 M 40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 40,000 miles (65 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 48,000 miles (78 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 358 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or N T 42 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E 56,000 miles (91 000 km). S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km). ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace the spark plugs. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Check and adjust hand brake. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 359 M 72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 72,000 miles (117 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 80,000 miles (130 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or N T 66 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E 88,000 miles (143 000 km). S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km). ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace the spark plugs. ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Check and adjust hand brake. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361 M 104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 104,000 miles (169 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 112,000 miles (182 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or N T 90 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E 120,000 miles (195 000 km). S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 128,000 miles (208 000 km). ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace the spark plugs. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Check and adjust hand brake. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363 M 136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 136,000 miles (221 000 km). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code 144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 144,000 miles (234 000 km). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Replace cabin filter. ❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks. ❏ Inspect brake linings. ❏ Inspect CV joints. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or N T 114 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of C irregular wear, even if it occurs before E S C H E D U L E S 8 152,000 miles (247 000 km). ❏ Flush and replace engine coolant. ❏ Replace the timing belt. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365 M WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ! Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ! If You Need Assistance ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 ! Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 ! Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Fiat Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 ! Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 9 368 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ! Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 369 the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it Prepare For The Appointment is advisable to make these arrangements when you call If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the for an appointment. right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services. current problem. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the service advisor know. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner. vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE 9 370 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE This is why you should always talk to an authorized FIAT Customer Center dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 solved with this process. Phone: (888) 242–6342 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech ship. They want to know if you need assistance. Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the • If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuniconcern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter ter should include the following information: (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. • Owner’s name and address Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 • Authorized dealership name and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) a Bell Relay Service operator. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 371 Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French). is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related The manufacturer will not stand behind any service concerns. contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It 9 372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the individual problems between you, your authorized DVD, for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group dealer, and the manufacturer. Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety market. Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373 West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also • Service Manuals obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforhttp://www.safercar.gov. mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainIn Canada ing, servicing, and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, should contact the Customer Service Department immedisystem, and/or components is written in straightforward ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practiPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians To order the following manuals, you may use either the to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vewebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mashicle systems and features. They show exactly how to tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acfind and correct problems the first time, using step-bycepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, for an order form. proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools NOTE: A street address is required when ordering and equipment. manuals (no P.O. Boxes). 9 374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE • Owner’s Manuals These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at: • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its teristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled condiTraction Grades tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenand C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on erate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboraWARNING! tory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 9 INDEX 10 378 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 323 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 312 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,194,315 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,50 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,55,70,135 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,46,49,50 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 44,46,50 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 322,347,348 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 194 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,329 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 INDEX 379 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 20 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,326 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,230 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 67 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 347 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,265 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,306 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,58 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 10 380 INDEX Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 186 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,348 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,325 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,325 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 322 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,191,192,198 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 INDEX 381 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Emergency, In Case of Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Driving Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 306 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Engine Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,265 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 109 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,347,348 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 144 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 10 382 INDEX Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . 50,301 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,68,265 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,319 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,348 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Flashers Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 348 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,134 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,348 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,266 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 INDEX 383 Light . . . . . . . Octane Rating . Requirements . Tank Capacity . Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 261 261 Hazard 347 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow 266 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,267 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,347 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Gauges Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,260 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 10 384 INDEX Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,287 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . Key, Replacement . . . . . Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 15 14 11 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,100 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,55,70,135 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 INDEX 385 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 138 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 136 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,102,134 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 133 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 138,307 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,329 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 10 386 INDEX New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,52 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 27,44,46,50 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,271 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,373 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,347 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 242 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Power Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 121 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,347 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 INDEX 387 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,62 Pretensioners Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,189 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 187 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 10 388 INDEX Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,102 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Specifications Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 109,135 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . 187 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,342 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 INDEX 389 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . . . . . . . . 118 . . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . . 312 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 194 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 142,272 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 242 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,246,374 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,243 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 256 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,246 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 10 390 INDEX Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Transmission Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,329 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,134 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 374 186 261 Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,342 Wait to Start Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . 133 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,372 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,107 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 INDEX 391 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,119 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,191,192 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,107 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,316 10 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 2012 FIAT 500 2012 OWNER’S MANUAL Chrysler Group LLC 12FF500-126-AF Sixth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500